2014 Buick Verano Owner Manual M - Dealer.com USInstrument Cluster on page 5-9. 4. Windshield...

Black plate (1,1)Buick Verano Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-6042574) - 2014 - crc - 10/18/13

2014 Buick Verano Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-32Universal Remote System . . . . 5-36

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-28Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-33Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-38Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-57

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


2014 Buick Verano Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, and VERANO aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for BuickMotor Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22821932 B Second Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

{ Warning

Text marked{ Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked{ Caution providesinformation that may indicate ahazard that could result in injuryor death. It could also result inpossible damage to the vehicle.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Universal Remote System . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-6.

2. Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.

Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-4.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

5. Keyless Access Ignition. SeeIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9-14 or IgnitionPositions (Key Access) onpage 9-16.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-46 (If Equipped).

6. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

7. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

8. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-12.

Trunk Release Button. SeeTrunk on page 2-14.

9. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

10. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-5.

11. Instrument Panel Fuse Blockon page 10-35.

12. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-14.

13. Cruise Control on page 9-35.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-38 (IfEquipped).

14. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

15. Horn on page 5-3.

16. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

17. Ignition Switch. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9-14 or Ignition Positions(Key Access) on page 9-16.

18. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-25 orManual Transmission onpage 9-28 (If Equipped).

19. Electric Parking Brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-31.

20. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-3 (IfEquipped).

Heated Front Seats onpage 3-6 (If Equipped).

21. Infotainment on page 7-1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof the two symbols for the remotetrunk release.

With Remote Start Shown

Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepushbutton start.


In Brief 1-5

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V orY : Press and hold torelease the trunk.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. Press and hold for atleast three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press again to cancelthe panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-9.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the door fromoutside the vehicle, press K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or use the key in thedriver door.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Push down on the door lock knobon the top of the door.


1-6 In Brief

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

See Door Locks on page 2-10 foradditional information.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2-11.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, press8 on the

center stack or pressV orY onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

For more information see:. Trunk on page 2-14.. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2-3.

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the driver door. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it.

See Power Windows on page 2-21for additional information.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.


1-8 In Brief

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-4.

Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Rear Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded.

For detailed instructions, see RearSeats on page 3-7.


In Brief 1-9

Heated Seats

Uplevel Automatic Climate ControlSystem Shown, Other Automatic

Systems Similar

If available, the controls are on theclimate control panel. The enginemust be running to operate theheated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-9.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-10.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-11.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-38.


1-10 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystem

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-24 for important information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on the centerstack when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. See Folding Mirrors onpage 2-19.

Interior Mirrors

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-20.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-20.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

( : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : Press to turn the lamps onautomatically when a door isopened.

' : Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

# or$ : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.


1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic lamp control offor on again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,instrument panel lights, andsidemarker lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : If equipped with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2. Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.


In Brief 1-13

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL : Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.

Climate Control System

1. Temperature Control

2. Air Delivery Modes

3. Fan Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Conditioning

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped).


1-14 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

English Shown, Metric Similar

1. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls


4. Heated Steering Wheel (IfEquipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Air Conditioning

7. Fan Controls


9. Defrost

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-3 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+) or(−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See Manual Mode on page 9-27.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.


In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O /VOL: Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or SiriusXM®,if equipped.

TUNE/MENU: Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

s © : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

¨\ : Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO (Information): Press to showavailable information about thecurrent station or track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7-4.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the FAV 1-2-3 button,then press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 for more thantwo seconds.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7-7.

Setting the Clock (Radiowith CD)

The clock menu can be only beused with the radio on while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date orpress H.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press TUNE/MENU to select thenext number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time and Date menu, press/ BACK at any time or press theTUNE/MENU knob afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press TUNE/MENU to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touch Screen)

The clock menu can be only beused with the radio on while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.


1-16 In Brief

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options or pressH. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll through the availablesetup features. Press TUNE/MENU or press the Time screenbutton to display other optionswithin that feature.

2. Press + or − to increase ordecrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

See Clock on page 5-5 for moreinformation.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and avalid SiriusXM satellite radiosubscription can receive SiriusXMprogramming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7-10.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console. Externaldevices such as iPods®, laptopcomputers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB drives may beconnected, depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-16.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.


In Brief 1-17

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7-19 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7-24 orBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7-21.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press the thumbwheelto select an audio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

Cruise Control

1 : Press the upper or lowerportion of the button to turn thecruise control system on or off. Anindicator light will turn on or off inthe instrument cluster.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel upbriefly to make the vehicle resumeto a previously set speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.


1-18 In Brief

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-35.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.There is also information on settingsand downloadable applications (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. w / x : Use the band to scrollthrough the items in each menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA is intended to helpavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator when a vehicle isdetected directly ahead. It provides

a visual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-38.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW is intended to helpavoid unintentional lane departuresat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected. If thevehicle departs the lane, theindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-46.


In Brief 1-19

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectvehicles in the next lane over in thevehicle's side blind zone area.When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-41.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on thecenter stack display, when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-43.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf equipped, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoiding

objects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-39.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center stack belowthe climate control and one on therear of the center floor console.These outlets are powered when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-21.

See Power Outlets on page 5-6.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, this system provides away to replace up to three remotecontrol transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-36.


1-20 In Brief

Sunroof

For vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-21.

Open/Close: Press switch (1) tothe first detent position.

Express Open/Close: Pressswitch (1) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

Automatic Tilt/Close: Press therear of switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press the front of switch (2)to close the sunroof vent.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2-23.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem also turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the g button on thecenter stack. The traction offlight i illuminates. Theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-30.


In Brief 1-21

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe g button, until the traction off

light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g illuminate.

. Press and release the g buttonagain to turn on both systems.The appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-30.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle's

tires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-48.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.


1-22 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Buick owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Immobilizer Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a Key Accessvehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

If the vehicle has an ignition and itbecomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within range. See“Keyless Access Operation”following.

The transmitter functions may workup to 60 m (197 ft) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof the two symbols for the remotetrunk release.

With Remote Start Shown

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “AutoDoor Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

The turn signal indicators may flashto indicate unlocking. See “RemoteUnlock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-16.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.



The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote LockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-16.

V orY (Remote TrunkRelease): Press and hold torelease the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the

turn signals flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped, press to operate theremote start feature. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-9.

The buttons on the transmitter aredisabled when there is a key in theignition, if equipped.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a KeylessAccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors withoutremoving the RKE transmitter fromyour pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.The RKE transmitter should bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the door beingopened. If the vehicle has thisfeature, there will be buttons on theoutside front door handles.

The vehicle can be customized toalways unlock all doors on the firstlock/unlock button press. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the driver door handle, pressingthe lock/unlock button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the lock/unlock button ispressed again within five seconds,all passenger doors will unlock. Pullthe door handle to unlatch the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar



Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. It has been more than

five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the passenger door handle,pressing the lock/unlock button onthe passenger door handle willunlock all doors.

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. The lock/unlock button was used

to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has opened

and all doors are now closed.

Passive Locking

If equipped with Keyless Access,this feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior or noneremain in the interior.

Temporary Disable PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote/Lock/Unlock/Start” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-32.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Key Vehicles Only)

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn to the key to the ON/RUN position.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.



3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeyVehicles Only)

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the 1st key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.


5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turn toON/RUN; the key is learned andall previously known keys will nolonger work with the vehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with aRecognized Key.”

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) near you.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the outside of thedriver door and turn the key tothe unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.



3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console cupholder. Thecupholder liner will need to beremoved to access thetransmitter pocket. Use a fingeror a tool in the notch at the rearof the cupholders to remove theliner. See Cupholders onpage 4-2.

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for at least10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the outside of thedriver door and turn the key tothe unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.



4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console cupholder. Thecupholder liner will need to beremoved to access thetransmitter pocket. Use a fingeror a tool in the notch at the rearof the cupholders to remove theliner. See Cupholders onpage 4-2.

5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for at least10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

When trying to start the vehicle,if the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYDETECTED, PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET, THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE. TheREPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY message may also bedisplayed at this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the cupholder liner fromthe center console cupholder.See Cupholders on page 4-2.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button. See Starting theEngine on page 9-18 foradditional information about thevehicle's keyless ignition withpushbutton start.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages onpage 5-29.



{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If thevehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start. SeeHeated Front Seats on page 3-6.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.



The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or if the key is in thevehicle (keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the door fromoutside the vehicle, press K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or use the key in thedriver door.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Push down on the door lock knobon the top of the door.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

Keyless Access

If equipped, use the keyless accesssystem to lock and unlock the door.When the doors are locked and theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of thedriver door handle, press the lock/unlock button. When unlocking fromthe driver door, the first press

unlocks that door; press againwithin five seconds to unlock allpassenger doors.

For more information see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2-3.. Power Door Locks on page 2-11.. Vehicle Personalization on

page 5-32.

Power Door Locks



K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actuallocking of the doors untilfive seconds after all doors areclosed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked Door AntiLockout feature has been turned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch with the door open,a chime will sound three timesindicating that delayed locking isactive.

The doors will then lockautomatically five seconds after alldoors are closed. If a door isreopened before five seconds have

elapsed, the five-second timer willreset once all the doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again, or press Q on the RKEtransmitter, to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

Delayed locking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Automatic Door LocksWhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for automatictransmissions, or the vehicle speedis above 13 km/h (8 mph) formanual transmissions, the doorswill lock.

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a power door lockswitch.

. For vehicles with an automatictransmission, shift thetransmission into P (Park).

. For vehicles with a manualtransmission and keyed ignitionsystem, remove the key from theignition when parked.

. For vehicles with a manualtransmission and pushbuttonstart system, turn the vehicle Offwhen parked.

Automatic door unlocking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Lockout ProtectionIf equipped with pushbutton startand the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,and locking is requested with thedriver door open, all doors will lockand only the driver door will unlock.



If equipped with a keyed ignition,and the key is in the ignition whenlocking is requested with the driverdoor open, all doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

Lockout Protection with the key inthe ignition can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

If Unlocked Door Anti Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, andlocking is requested with the driverdoor open, all doors will lock andonly the driver door will unlock. TheUnlocked Door Anti Lockout featurecan be turned on or off using thevehicle personalization menus. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Power Safety Locks

If equipped, pressv { to activatethe safety locks. The indicator lightwill illuminate.

This switch also disables the powerwindow controls on the rear doors.

Pressv { again to deactivate thesafety locks and rear window.

If a rear door handle is being pulledwhen the safety lock is deactivated,that door will remain locked and theindicator light may flash. Release

the handle, then press the safetylock twice to deactivate the safetylocks.

Manual Safety Locks

If equipped, the safety lock islocated on the inside edge of therear doors. To use the safety lock:

1. Insert the key into the safety lockslot and turn it so the slot is inthe horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.



To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by lifting therear door lock, using the powerdoor lock switch, or with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it fromthe outside.

2. Insert the key into the safety lockslot and turn it so the slot is inthe vertical position.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-24.



Trunk Release

Use one of the following methods toopen the trunk. The vehicle must beoff, or stopped with the parkingbrake applied (manualtransmission), or the shift lever mustbe in P (Park) (automatictransmission), in order for the trunkto be opened.

. Press8 on the center stack.

. PressV orY on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

{ Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle inside the trunk onthe trunk lid. The release handle

can be accessed by folding the rearseatback. See Rear Seats onpage 3-7. Pull the release handle toopen the trunk from the inside.

To close the trunk, use the pullhandle.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has a anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system:

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunkis open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the trunk and the hood.Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:. Use the RKE transmitter.. Use the Keyless Access

system, if equipped.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

If a door, the hood, or the trunk isopened without first disarming thesystem, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

Do one of the following to disarmthe alarm system or turn off thealarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.



. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all

occupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages onpage 5-31.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarms

the system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key.



If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. See yourdealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispushed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light on the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the vehicle does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter,or place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

If the vehicle does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the transmitterpocket, your vehicle needs service.See your dealer who can servicethe theft-deterrent system and havea new transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have heatedmirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1 for more information.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare fromthe headlamps from behind.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See a dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See a dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

The power window switches on thedriver door control all four windows.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-21.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express down orup feature allow the windows to belowered or raised without holdingthe switch. All door windows havethe express down feature. Frontdoor windows may also have theexpress up feature. Pull a windowswitch up or push it down all theway, release it, and the windowgoes up or down automatically. Stopthe window by pushing or pulling theswitch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the windows withthe express-up feature will need tobe reprogrammed for the feature towork. Before reprogramming,replace or recharge the vehicle'sbattery.



To program each front window:

1. Be sure the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or in RAP.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Rear Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position. Therear door locks will also be disabledand only operate from the driverdoor. This feature only works whenthe ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or in RAP.

Pressv { to activate the rearwindow lockout and door locks. Theindicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv { to deactivate thelockout.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof operateswhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-21.

Open/Close: Press switch (1) tothe first detent position.

Express Open/Close: Pressswitch (1) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

Automatic Tilt/Close: Press therear of switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press the front of switch (2)to close the sunroof vent.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the front of switch (1)or (2). The sunroof closes withoutthe safety function. To stop themovement, release the switch.

Initializing

After a power failure, the sunroofoperation may be limited. Have thesystem initialized by a dealertechnician.

Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.



Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-29

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-35Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-47


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions. Theheight of the head restraint can beadjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.



Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Uplevel Automatic Climate ControlSystem Shown, Other Automatic

Systems Similar

If available, the controls are on theclimate control panel. The enginemust be running to operate theheated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the heated seatcontrols to use the heated seatsafter the vehicle is started.



The heated seat indicator lights onthe control do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-9 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

Rear SeatsEither side of the rear seatback canbe folded.

To fold the rear seatbacks:

1. Place the front seatbacks in theupright position. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-4.

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

2. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand make sure the safety beltbuckles are stowed in thepockets in the seat cushion.

3. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on top of the seatback.



4. Reach under the safety belt andpull the lever to unlock theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

5. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat Steps 1–4 for the otherseatback, if desired.

To raise the seatback:

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on the top of theseatback.

2. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward until it clicks into place.Keep the safety belts clear of theseatback and untwisted.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, let thebelt go back all the way andstart again.



{ Warning

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always pull forward on the top ofthe seatback at the area of thelatch to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked intoposition.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 for the otherseatback, if necessary.

Keep the seat in the upright lockedposition when not in use.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-11.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-30 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-32.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-16.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-10.

Press the release button and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition. The adjuster can be movedup by pushing the slide/trim up.After the adjuster is set to the

desired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

And, on vehicles with side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-17.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through the dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat. To install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

5. To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Store the guide in its storagepocket on the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never

use it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-11.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-12.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.



. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-21.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-30 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-32.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second row seat‐mounted side impact airbags, theyare in the sides of the rear seatbackclosest to the door.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-17. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal impacts. Knee airbagsare not designed to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,or in many side impacts.



Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-19.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. In

moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-21.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-19.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn off

the hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.



. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the center stack whenthe vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and knee

airbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passenger



frontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if the systemdetermines that an infant is presentin a child restraint. If a child restrainthas been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-47or Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3-45.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag(s) fora child in a child restraint dependingupon the child's size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.Also, remove laptops, or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system



operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag(s) when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens, theoff indicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag(s) while achild restraint or child occupant

is on the seat. If the passengerairbag(s) are turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-12 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly

turning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-24.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-56 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.



{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-19. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-11. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-11.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's



weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-24 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturer

recommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-36 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-36.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments to

secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired rear outboardseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard rear seatingpositions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of thechild restraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head Restraint



Removal andReinstallation” at the end ofthis section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the top tether anchorcover to expose the anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraint androute the single tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraint androute the tether under thehead restraint and aroundthe head restraint posts.



If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the singletether over the seatback.

If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the dualtether over the seatback.

If you are using a singletether in the rear centerseating position, route thesingle tether over theheadrest.

If you are using a dualtether in the rear centerseating position, route thedual tether over theheadrest.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3-7 for additionalinformation.



2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches on theposts must face the driver sideof the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

3. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or even

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

death in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-38 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be

sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-36.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-38.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal and

Reinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-36.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-24 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-24 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag, theoff indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you start

the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side-to-side andback-and-forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-24 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Pull down to open it.

Glove Box

Lift up on the lever to open it.

The glove box features a penholder (1).

The intermediate shelf (2) can beremoved by pulling on thefront edge.


4-2 Storage

To reinstall the shelf, slide it into theside guides (1) and push back untilit engages into the rear panel (2).

Cupholders

There are two cupholders in thecenter console with a removableliner. To remove the liner, lift up onthe notch on the underside of therear of the cupholder.

Rear Seat

There are two cupholders in the rearseat armrest. Lower the rear seatarmrest to access the cupholders.

Center Console Storage

The armrest is adjustable. Lift thelever to move it forward or rearward.


Storage 4-3

The armrest must be in the rearwardposition to open it. Lift the lever andthen lift up on the armrest to accessthe storage area.

If equipped, there is a USB port andauxiliary input jack inside thestorage area. See Auxiliary Deviceson page 7-16.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-18Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-28Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-29Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-29Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-31Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-32Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-32


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-36Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. See“Bluetooth” or “OnStar” in theseparate infotainment manual.



$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to selectan audio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn it on or off.A light on the button displays whenthe feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.



INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-26.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI,or INT, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluid

on page 10-21 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive the



vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5-27 for themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. The clock menu can beonly be used with the radio on whilein ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.See Operation on page 7-4 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock (Radiowith CD)

To set the time:


2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press TUNE/MENU to select thenext number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time and Date menu, press/ BACK at any time or press theTUNE/MENU knob afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press TUNE/MENU to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touch Screen)

The clock is in the center stackdisplay.

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options or pressH. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll through the availablesetup features and select Timeand Date. Press TUNE/MENU orpress the Time screen button todisplay other options within thatfeature.



2. Press + or − to increase ordecrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center stack belowthe climate control and one on therear of the center floor console.These outlets are powered when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-21.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-57.



{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

{ Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, the ashtray can be placedinto the front console cupholders.

To open the ashtray, lift the lid of theashtray. After using, close the lid.

To empty the ashtray for cleaning,slightly turn the upper part of theashtray counterclockwise andremove it.

{ Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-22.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with thetachometer in the shaded warningarea, the vehicle could bedamaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge tells you about how muchfuel you have left in your tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the fuel is low, a messagemay appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), and achime will sound. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-29 for moreinformation.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with your fuelgauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge


This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward theshaded area, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-24.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-17.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-24 for



important safety information. Thecenter stack has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check. Then,after several seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFFto let you know the status of thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensing

system has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN for Key Access or ServiceOnly Mode for Keyless Access, as acheck to show it is working. If itdoes not, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9-14 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9-16 for moreinformation.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that theOBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the dealer technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and



could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-50. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-48.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel next to the steering wheel.See your dealer if assistance isneeded.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on while the engine is running,or the malfunction indicator lampis not on while the vehicle is inON/RUN or Service Only Mode.See your dealer for assistance inverifying proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. If this were to occur, thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced orrun down.

The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of driving. If thishas been done and the vehiclestill does not pass the inspectionfor lack of OBD II systemreadiness, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

The brake system warning light willcome on with the electric parkingbrake light when the electric parkingbrake is applied. Both lights will stayon until the electric parking brake isreleased.

The brake system warning light willalso come on when there is a brakeproblem.

If the warning light stays on whenthe electric parking brake is notapplied, have the vehicle inspectedby your dealer right away.



Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-72.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)light should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake is

released, or while driving, there is aproblem with the EPB system.A message may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5-26 for more information.

The brake system warning light willcome on with the electric parkingbrake light when the electric parkingbrake is applied. Both lights will stayon until the electric parking brake isreleased.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the EPB towork at a reduced level. The vehiclecan still be driven, but should be



taken to a dealer as soon aspossible. See Parking Brake onpage 9-31 for more information.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-16.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5-26 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the light then turns off.

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines thatthe vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-46.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If available, this light displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-38.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.



If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-31. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-47.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-49.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

oil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle



could be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

For more information on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 5-29.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) on page 2-17 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2-18.

High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.



The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps on page 6-4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-35.

Door Ajar Light

If equipped, this light comes onwhen a door is open or not securelylatched. Before driving, check thatall doors are properly closed. SeeDoor Ajar Messages on page 5-27.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-26. All messages appear inthe DIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

On some models, the DIC may havesome warning lights or indicatorsshown in the top portion of thedisplay. See Warning Lights,Gauges, and Indicators onpage 5-8.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.



DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal lever.The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows the position of the shift leverand the odometer. It may also showthe direction the vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press toset or clear the menu item whenit is displayed.

2. w / x (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will moveacross the bottom of the page asyou scroll through the items.This shows where each page isin the menu.

3. MENU: Press to get to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Usew / x to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2

. Fuel Range

. Average Fuel Economy

. Instantaneous Fuel Economy

. Average Vehicle Speed

. Timer

. Navigation

. Blank Display

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 and Trip 2

These displays show the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR, or thetrip odometer reset stem in thecluster, while the trip odometerdisplay is showing.



Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). Average fuel economyis calculated based on the numberof L/100 km (mpg) recorded sincethe last time this menu item wasreset. The average fuel economycan be reset by pressing SET/CLRwhile the Average Fuel Economydisplay is showing.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon

(mpg). The instantaneous fueleconomy reflects only the currentfuel economy and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange. Unlike average economy,this display cannot be reset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is being

shown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation

This display is used for theNavigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the infotainmentmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Vehicle InformationMenu is displayed. Usew / x toscroll through the following menuitems:. Unit



. Tire Pressure

. Remaining Oil Life

. Battery Voltage

Unit

Press SET/CLR to set. Movew / x to switch between metric orUS when the set Unit display isactive. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10-48 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-49 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-28. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-9. In additionto the Engine Oil Life Systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-2 for more information.

Remember, the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay must be reset after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset theRemaining Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until

the next oil change. To reset theEngine Oil Life System, press SET/CLR while the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

Battery Voltage

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read Battery Voltage 15.0Volts. The vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof the battery. The battery voltagecan fluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5-13 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message

Compass

The vehicle has a compass displayin the DIC. See Compass onpage 5-4 for more information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-24.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-22.

HILL START ASSIST ACTIVE

This message is displayed when HillStart Assist (HSA) is preventing thevehicle from rolling while driving offon a grade. See Hill Start Assist(HSA) on page 9-33.

PRESS BRAKE PEDAL TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9-31 for more information.

RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is appliedwhile the vehicle is in motion.



Release it before you attempt todrive. See Parking Brake onpage 9-31 for more information.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9-31 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5-4.

– –Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.



COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10-16.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10-19.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When the engine oil is changed, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22, EngineOil on page 10-9, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-2.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

OIL PRESSURE LOW— STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime this



message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with Keyless Access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. See “Battery

Replacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

USE TRANSMITTER POCKETTO START

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If your vehicle has the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9-38.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. To clean the system,clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system,this message may display if theLDW system cannot activate due toa temporary condition. See LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) onpage 9-46 for more information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporary



condition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9-39.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled and needservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9-39 for more information.

SERVICE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM

If this message appears, there is aproblem with the SBZA system.If the message persists aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the system off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that theSBZA system is disabled becausethe sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in the blind zone.The sensor may be blocked by mud,dirt, snow, ice, or slush. Thismessage may also activate duringheavy rain or due to road spray. Thevehicle does not need service. Forcleaning, see Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) on page 9-41.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When this

message is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.If this message appears, try to resetthe system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then startthe engine again. If this messagestill comes on, it means there is aproblem. See your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.



TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-49.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-49.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-20.

If a tire pressure message displays,inflate the tires until the tire pressureis equal to the values shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10-39, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9, and TirePressure on page 10-47.

More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at a time.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-22.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.



Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10-21.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work.See Power Windows on page 2-21.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

TUNE/MENU: Press the center ofthis knob to enter the menus andselect menu items. This feature isunavailable with navigation radios.Turn the knob to scroll through themenus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings. Pressthe CONFIG button until Vehicleis highlighted on vehicles with anavigation system only.

3. Press the center of the TUNE/MENU knob to select the VehicleSettings menu. The key must bein the ON/RUN position.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision Detection Systems. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings?

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the menu. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to select it. Eachof the menus is detailed in thefollowing information.



Vehicles with a navigation systemwill display a checkmark to indicatethis feature is on.

Climate and Air Quality

If equipped, select the Climate andAir Quality menu and the followingmay be displayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. This featuresets the climate control fan speed tomaintain the interior temperature.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Fan Speed is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

On vehicles with remote start andheated seats, the heated seats canbe set to on or off.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Start Auto Heat Seats ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight On or Off.Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Defog

When turned on and high humidityis detected, the climate controlsystem may adjust to outside airsupply and turn on the airconditioner or the heater. The fanspeed may slightly increase to helpprevent fogging. When highhumidity is no longer detected, thesystem will return to its prioroperation.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Defog is highlighted to openthe menu. Turn the knob to highlight

On or Off. Press / BACK to confirmthe selection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Rear Defog

When on, this feature turns on therear defogger at vehicle start whenthe interior temperature is cold andfog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1 for more information.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Rear Defog is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and ChimeVolume may be displayed.



Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenChime Volume is highlighted. Turnthe knob to select Normal or High.Press / BACK to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Collision Detection Systems

If equipped, select the CollisionDetection Systems menu and ParkAssist may be displayed.. Park Assist. Side Blind Zone Alert

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist feature to be turnedon or off.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenPark Assist is highlighted. Turn theknob to select On or Off. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert feature to be turned on or off.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenSide Blind Zone Alert is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the TUNE/MENU knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Exit Lighting. Vehicle Locator Lights

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenExit Lighting is highlighted. Turn theknob to select Off, 30 Seconds, ,or . Press / BACK to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. When on, theheadlamps and back-up lamps turnon and the turn signals will flashwhen K is pressed.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenVehicle Locator Lights is highlightedto open the menu. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to highlight On or Off.Press TUNE/MENU to select On orOff. Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may be displayed:. Open Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delay Door Lock



Open Door Anti Lock Out

When on, all doors will lock. Thedriver door will then unlock if doorlocking is requested while the driverdoor is open, and disable the DelayDoor Lock feature.

Even when this feature is off, thedriver is protected from accidentallockouts when the key is in theignition.

If Off is selected, the Open DoorAnti Lock Out feature may beenabled through an additional menuselection.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenOpen Door Anti Lock Out ishighlighted to select On or Off.Press / BACK to return to thelast menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select All Doors,Driver Door, or Off. Press the TUNE/MENU knob to confirm and pressBACK to go back to the last menu.Press / BACK to return to thelast menu.

Delay Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Press either the power lockbutton or Q on the RKE transmittertwice to override the delay lockingfeature and immediately lock all ofthe doors.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenDelay Door Lock is highlighted toselect On or Off. Press / BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following may be displayed(depending on the system):. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Unlock Feedback

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Lock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the TUNE/MENUknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.



Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select All Doors orDriver Door Only. When set toDriver Door Only, the driver door willunlock the first time K is pressed

and all doors will unlock when K ispressed a second time. When set toAll Doors, all of the doors will unlockat the first press of K. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Remote Unlock Feedback

If equipped, this allows selection ofwhat type of feedback is given whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Unlock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectFlash Lights or Off. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select Return to Factory Settings?to return all vehicle personalizationto the default settings. Turn theknob to select Yes or No. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.



Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight changes from a slow to arapid flash. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, then



programming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3 ,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door opener receiver

does not flash, press and holdthe same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming helpcall 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long



enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic lamp controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with theparking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, instrument panel lights,and sidemarker lamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened when the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

# (Front Fog Lamps):If equipped, press to turn the lampson or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5-22.


6-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

3 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you and release toturn the high beams on.

To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow-beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamp control to O andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the DRL cannot beturned off.


Lighting 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6-1.

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel. Makesure it is not covered, or theheadlamps will be on when they arenot needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press andmomentarily hold again to turn theflashers off.


6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulb

may be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If a bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10-31.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is on the outboard side ofthe instrument panel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# (Front Fog Lamps): Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the foglamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high-beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panelcontrols and infotainment displayscreen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in thedoor position.

Dome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

( (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

H (Door): Press to turn the lampson automatically when a door isopened.

' (On): Press to turn on thedome lamps.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.


6-6 Lighting

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

# or$ (Reading Lamps): Pressthe button near each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, back-up lamps, and mostof the interior lamps turn on brieflyat night or in areas of limited lightingwhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lamps will dimto off. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, and license plate lampscome on at night, or in areas withlimited lighting, when the key isremoved from the ignition. Thedome lamps also come on when thekey is removed from the ignition.The exterior lamps and dome lampsremain on after the door is closedfor a set amount of time, thenautomatically turn off.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the exterior lamps and dome lampsautomatically turn on when thedriver door is opened after theignition is turned off. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9-14 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9-16.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.


Lighting 6-7

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-19Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.


7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-21.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (Radio with CD)

1. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a different audiosource.

2. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

3. s © (Previous/Reverse)

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.



. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

4. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

5. ¨\ (Next/Forward)

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

6. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites Page). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

7. CD. Selects the CD player.

8. AUX (Auxiliary). Selects an external audio

source.

9. V /8 (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

10. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

11. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

12. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

13. TUNE/MENU. Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,or set numeric valueswhile in a menu.

. Press to select menuitems.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

14. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the settings menu.

15. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

16. Z (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

17. H (Clock)

. Opens the clock menu.

18. AS 1-2 (Autostore). Radio: Opens the auto

store stations list.



Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn toadjust the volume.

V /8 (Phone/Mute): Press tomute the infotainment system. PressV /8 again, or turn the O /VOLknob to cancel mute.

Menu System (Radio with CD)

For radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Using the System” inthe infotainment manual.

Controls

The TUNE/MENU knob and /BACK are used to navigate themenu system.

TUNE/MENU:

Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

/ BACK:

Press to:. Exit a menu.

. Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen.

. Delete the last character in asequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.



Activating a Setting

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the character.

Press / BACK to delete the lastcharacter in the sequence or pressand hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the TUNE/MENUknob until the value changesto 0.

Press / BACK to go back to theTone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.




Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press / BACK to go back to theSystem Configuration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.





Radio

AM-FM RadioFor radios with CD and touchscreen, see “AM-FM Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

O /VOL (Power/Volume):. Press to turn the radio on or off.. Turn the knob to increase or

decrease the volume. Thevolume is adjusted for thecurrent audio source or voiceprompts.

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and SiriusXM®, if equipped.

TUNE/MENU: Turn to navigate theavailable menus and to search forstations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

s © or ¨\ : Press to search forstations.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list and select thefavorites page.

Buttons 1−6: Press to selectpreset stations.

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Press to openthe autostore list.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly presss © or ¨\ toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holds © or ¨\ untilthe station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.



Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe station lists are updated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe TUNE/MENU knob.

Radio Settings

To access the Radio Settings menu:


2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob untilRadio Settings displays. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob to displayother options within that feature.

Audio system settings or featurescan be customized for:. Auto Volume. Maximum Start Up Volume. Radio Favorites. RDS Options. XM Categories

Auto Volume: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select volume Off,Low, Medium, or High.

Maximum Start Up Volume: Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to increaseor decrease the infotainment startupvolume.

Radio Favorites: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to highlight the numberof favorites. Press the TUNE/MENUknob to select.

RDS Options: Press the TUNE/MENU knob to turn RDS on or off.



XM Categories: If equipped, turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to highlightthe category. Press the TUNE/MENU knob to select. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to Show all XMCategories to display all categories.

Finding a Station

Select a band such as AM, FM,or SIriusXM (if equipped).

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, press the correspondingpreset button.

Seeking a Station

Presss © or ¨\ to search for astation.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. Each page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be from differentradio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV 1-2-3 (favorites) button. Thecurrent page number displays abovethe preset buttons. The storedstations for each list display at thebottom of the screen. The number ofpreset FAV lists can be changed.

To store a radio station to afavorites page:

1. Press the RADIO/BAND buttonuntil the desired band isselected.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tothe station.

3. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll the list.

4. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons for more thantwo seconds. The stationfrequency appears on the presetbutton at the bottom of thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps for each presetin each page.

To recall a preset station from afavorites page:

1. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll to the page.

2. Press the preset button. Thestored preset station is recalled.

Autostore Stations

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press RADIO/BAND to selectFM or AM.

2. Press AS 1-2 for at leasttwo seconds until a beepsounds. SEARCH displays onthe radio, followed by thenumber of stations found.

3. The radio will automatically storethe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS 1-2 button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.



AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function withSIriusXM radio stations.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has RDS. RDSfeatures are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, theradio can:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station could

broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe current FM station, the stationname or call letters display on theaudio screen. RDS can provide aprogram type (PTY) for currentprogramming and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

Satellite RadioFor radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Satellite Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Vehicles with an SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid SiriusXMSatellite Radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.


SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theSiriusXM radio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM.

s © or ¨\ : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list.

Buttons 1−6: Press to select afavorite.



TUNE/MENU: Turn to select achannel.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

w / j (Play/Pause): Press topause time shifted content,if equipped.

Selecting the SiriusXM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between AM, FM, and XM.The last channel played in that bandbegins to play when that band isselected.

SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using thes © or ¨\ buttons,or the TUNE/MENU knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting an SiriusXM Channel

SiriusXM channels can be selectedby usings © or ¨\ , the TUNE/MENU knob, or the TUNE/MENUsystem.

Selecting a Channel Usings © or¨\. Press and releases © or ¨\

to go to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holds © or ¨\ toscroll through the previous ornext channel until the channel isreached.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE/MENU Knob

To select a channel using theTUNE/MENU knob:

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob andselect Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE/MENU System


2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an SiriusXM Channelas a Favorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.



Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a position inthe list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to opena favorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) or1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated. Noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour SiriusXM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:SiriusXM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the SiriusXMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theSiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.



Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.


SiriusXM Satellite Radio Serviceprovides digital radio reception. Tallbuildings or hills can interfere withsatellite radio signals, causing thesound to fade in and out. In

addition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.



{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

{ Caution

Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. Themetallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it isopen, reception can also beaffected.

Audio Players

CD PlayerFor radios with CD and touchscreen, see “CD Player” in theinfotainment manual.

The CD player can be used for CDsand MP3s.

With the ignition on, insert a CD intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and begins playing.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) forvideo to display.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the quality



of the music or video that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the disc using amarking pen.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to select the CD player.

s © or ¨\: Press to selecttracks or to rewind or fast forwardwithin a track.

INFO (Information): Press todisplay additional information aboutthe current track that may beavailable.

TUNE/MENU: Turn this knob todisplay the track list. Press to selectthe track from the list. The systemplays the selected track and returnsto the CD screen.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressZ.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD button if there is adisc in the player; it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holds © or ¨\ torewind or fast forward within thecurrent track.



Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Error Messages

If Disc Read Error displays and/orthe disc comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is not from a correct

region.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

Auxiliary DevicesFor radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Auxiliary Devices” inthe infotainment manual.

The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary jack or USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7-4.



The AUX input and USB port (ifequipped) are in the center console.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

Not all USB drives are compatiblewith the USB port. Check the heightof the USB drive prior to closing thearm rest.

If equipped with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system. Devices arealso charged while plugged into theUSB port.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks that are found can besearched for by:. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Audio Books

. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audio Books, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the / BACK buttonto return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.



Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the/ BACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.



Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Bluetooth” in theinfotainment manual.

For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.



. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7-4.

V /8 (Phone/Mute): Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressto mute the audio system.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.



How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theO /VOL knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Bluetooth” in theinfotainment manual.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7-4.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.



Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate and select the devicenamed after the vehicle makeand model in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4, or toconfirm the six-digit codematches. The system recognizesthe new connected phone afterthe pairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1–6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.



The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. PressV /8 once or twice,depending on the radio.

2. Select Phone Book from thehome screen.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the TUNE/MENU buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:

1. PressV /8 once or twice,depending on the radio.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7-4.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press TUNE/MENU toaccept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU todecline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press TUNE/MENU toaccept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU todecline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Switch Calls fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.



To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Enter Number or pressthe TUNE/MENU knob to selectEnter Number.

3. For the radio with CD only, enterthe character sequence thenselect Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7-4. For theradio with CD and touch screen,enter the number.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press TUNE/MENU andchoose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps1–4. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

For the radio with CD:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7-4.

For the radio with CD and TouchScreen:

1. Touch Enter Number.

2. Use the keypad to enter thenumber.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

For radios with CD and touchscreen, see “Bluetooth” in theinfotainment manual.

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features. Foradditional information say "Help"while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will be



made using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first paired

to the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide a

name for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”



Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.



To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press b / g.The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Redial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Redial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Redial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “DeletingName Tags.”

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information


Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.



Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod and iPhone” meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®

service only available in the48 contiguous United States andCanada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio.

Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for SiriusXM SatelliteRadio receivers by notifyingSiriusXM:. USA Customers — Visit

www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349.

. Canadian Customers — Visitwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights including



patent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theSiriusXM service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreementis required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operating asSiriusXM Canada).

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For moreinformation, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and musicand video-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. One or morepatents owned by Gracenote applyto this product and service. See theGracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”) fromonline servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agree thatyou will use Gracenote Data, the



Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violate theserestrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. Formore information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, andnon-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote Software or anyGracenote Server. In no case will



Gracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with this system.

1. Temperature Control


3. Fan Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Conditioning


7. Defrost

9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Turn the knob completely to 0 toturn off the fan and air conditioningcompressor.


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature setting.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Press[,Y , or X to change thedirection of the airflow. Air deliverymode settings can be combined. Anindicator light comes on in theselected mode button.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off. Anindicator light comes on. If the fan isturned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning compressor willnot work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering. To improve fuel efficiencyand to cool the vehicle faster,recirculation may be automaticallyselected in warm weather when thetemperature is set to the coldestsetting. The recirculation light willnot come on. Pressh to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again it runs forabout five minutes beforeturning off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

{ Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.


1. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls


4. Heated Steering Wheel (IfEquipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Air Conditioning

7. Fan Controls


9. Defrost

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode orfan setting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster,recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light



will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan Control): Press the lower9 button to decrease the fanspeed. Pressing the lower buttonlonger turns the fan and cooling off.Press the upper9 button toincrease the fan speed. Theselected fan speed is indicated by anumber on the display screen.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: Press[,Y,

or X to change the direction of theairflow. Air delivery mode settingscan be combined. An indicator lightcomes on in the selected modebutton.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioningcompressor will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see "Climate and Air Quality"under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.



Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation; see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 4°C(40°F) and below. The auto reardefogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button is

on and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2-19.

{ Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anythingelse that is sharp. This maydamage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

M or L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated seats on or off. See HeatedFront Seats on page 3-6.

( (Heated Steering Wheel, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off. SeeHeated Steering Wheel onpage 5-3.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver’sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. The rear defogmay come on during remote startbased on cold ambient conditions.The rear defog indicator light doesnot come on during a remote start.If the vehicle has front heated seats,they may come on during a remotestart. The heated seat indicatorlights do not come on during aremote start. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-9 and Heated FrontSeats on page 3-6.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.



The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

Use the thumbwheels near the airvents to control the amount ofairflow or to shut off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

See your dealer regardingreplacement of the filter.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-28

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-33

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Driver Assistance SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-39Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-49California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-50Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51


9-2 Driving and Operating

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Trailer Towing (2.0LEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Trailer Towing (Except 2.0LEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-9.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery



The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other

material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.



{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-39.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.



. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

loss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.

Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-30.



Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-24.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.



If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-33.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-72.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

1. Number of Occupant SeatingPositions

2. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight

3. Size of the OriginalEquipment Tires

4. Recommended Cold TireInflation Pressure

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center

pillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10-39 andTire Pressure on page 10-47.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing (2.0L Engine)on page 9-55 or Trailer Towing(Except 2.0L Engine) onpage 9-55 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labeltells the gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,



fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.



Automatic Transmission

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-21.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displaya message. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-31. When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition system will switch to OFF.

Manual Transmission

If the vehicle is stationary, theignition will turn OFF, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-21.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-31.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowsyou to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.



The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9-18. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.

The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-21.



This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe ignition and automatictransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to Neutral,continue to firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-31.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. To movethe key from ACC/ACCESSORY toLOCK/OFF, push in the key andthen turn it to LOCK/OFF.

3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

4 (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.



A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2-1.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission and a key startsystem, are equipped with anelectronic key lock release. The keylock release is designed to preventignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10-69.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-57.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.



Starting Procedure (Key Access)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine

is already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between each

try, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess system, the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittermust be in the vehicle. Put yourfoot on the brake pedal andpress the ENGINE START/STOP button. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.



The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a message.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5-29.

If the battery in the RKEtransmitter needs replacing, theDIC will display a message. Thevehicle can still be driven. SeeKey and Lock Messages onpage 5-29.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed,and then released when the

engine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the button ispressed for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped bypressing the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the ENGINE START/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key or button,and the accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.



Engine HeaterThe engine heater, if available, canhelp in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F) for easier startingand better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Plug in the heaterat least four hours before startingthe vehicle. An internal thermostatin the plug end of the cord willprevent engine heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. For vehicles witha 2.4L engine, the electrical cordis located on the passenger sideof the engine compartment, nearthe air cleaner. For vehicles witha 2.0L turbo engine, theelectrical cord is located on thefront of the engine, on the driverside of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened or the key is removed fromthe ignition.



Shifting Into ParkUse this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9-31for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).


4. Remove the key (if equipped).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-22. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-52.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly; then it is difficult toshift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting out of Park

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The shift lock controlsystem is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of an unchargedor low voltage (less than 9‐volt)battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

If the shift lever cannot be movedout of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUNposition. See Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9-14or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9-16 for moreinformation.

3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way into P (Park).

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Move the shift lever into thedesired gear.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever into

R (Reverse) if parking on a downhillslope. On a level surface or anuphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.Firmly apply the parking brake. Turnthe wheels toward the curb for adownhill slope, or away from thecurb for an uphill slope. Once theshift lever has been placed into gearwith the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key, and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-22and Engine Exhaust on page 9-24.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking onpage 9-23.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-52.



AutomaticTransmission

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-22 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-52.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift lever



all the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9-23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, use

N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

{ Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

{ Caution

Driving with the engine at a highrpm without upshifting while usingDriver Shift Control (DSC), coulddamage the vehicle. Alwaysupshift when necessary whileusing DSC.

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+) or(−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in the DIC.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.



While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

Manual Transmission

This is the shift pattern for the6-speed manual transmission.

To operate the transmission:

{ Caution

Do not rest your hand on the shiftlever while driving. The pressurecould cause premature wear inthe transmission. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving or whilestopped. The pressure can causepremature wear in the clutch. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop and shift into1 (First). Then slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

If you come to a complete stop andit is hard to shift into 1 (First), putthe shift lever in Neutral and let upon the clutch. Press the clutch pedalback down. Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.



3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal. Forthe best fuel economy, use 6 (Sixth)gear whenever vehicle speed anddriving conditions allow.

{ Warning

If you skip a gear whendownshifting, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Do notshift down more than one gear ata time when downshifting.

{ Caution

Do not skip gears whileupshifting. This can causepremature wear in thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, with thevehicle at a complete stop, pressdown the clutch pedal. Then pull upon the button on the shift lever, andshift into R (Reverse). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal. If R (Reverse)

gear does not engage, shift thetransmission to Neutral, release theclutch pedal, and press it backdown. Repeat the gear selection.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

Use R (Reverse) along with theparking brake to park the vehicle.

When operating, press the clutchpedal down completely. Do not usethe pedal as a foot rest.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-18.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)switch is on the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is off. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB when the engineis not running.

The system has a red parking brakestatus light and an amber parkingbrake warning light. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-17.There are also parking brake-relatedDriver Information Center (DIC)

messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5-26. In case ofinsufficient electrical power, the EPBcannot be applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe red parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

The red parking brake status lightwill flash and then stay on once theEPB is fully applied. If the redparking brake status light flashescontinuously, then the EPB is onlypartially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If thelight does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if the red

parking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5-17.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, lift up on the EPB switchand hold it up. Continue to hold theswitch until the red parking brakestatus light remains on. If the amberparking brake warning light remainson, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld up. If the switch is held up untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations whenthe vehicle is not moving. This isnormal, and is done to periodicallycheck the correct operation of theEPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.



EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Push down momentarily on theEPB switch.

The EPB is released when the redparking brake status light is off.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, release the EPB bypushing down on the EPB switchand holding it down. Continue tohold the switch until the red parkingbrake status light is off. If either lightstays on after release is attempted,see your dealer.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

The EPB can also be used toprevent roll back for vehicles with amanual transmission taking off on ahill. When no roll back is desired, anapplied EPB will allow both feet to

be used for the clutch andaccelerator pedals in preparation forstarting the vehicle moving in theintended direction. In this case,there is no need to push the switchto release the EPB.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-52.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. The



stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade (less than 10%). This featureis designed to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.

After the driver completely stopsand holds the vehicle in a completestandstill on a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated and the DICwill display the HILL START ASSISTACTIVE message. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure to ensure that there is norolling. The brakes will automaticallyrelease after three seconds or whenthe accelerator pedal is appliedwithin the three-second window.A pop noise might be heard whenthe brakes release. This is normal.It will not activate if the vehicle is ina drive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the



vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-9 and “Turning the SystemsOff and On” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center stack.



{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-30.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-30.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

Cruise ControlThe cruise control lets the vehiclemaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systemthat begins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control and the cruise



control will automatically disengage.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33. If acollision alert occurs when cruisecontrol is activated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System on page 9-38.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, the cruisecontrol can be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.

1 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on or off. Anwhite indicator light will turn on or offin the instrument cluster.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed or hold to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press 1 to turn cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a greencruise control indicator appears onthe instrument cluster.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. Once thevehicle speed is about 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to thepreviously set speed.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase the speed in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in very smallincrements, move thethumbwheel toward SET/−briefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previousset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflymoving the thumbwheel towardSET– will result in cruise control setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When going

downhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied, the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal,the indicator light will go off.

. Press*.

. To turn off the cruise controlsystem, press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressing 1or if the vehicle is turned off.



Driver AssistanceSystems

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemThe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)system may help to avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a visual alertand beeps when approaching avehicle directly ahead too quickly.

The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. The vehicle ahead indicatorwill display green when a vehicle is

detected in front. Vehicles may notbe detected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills; or due to poorvisibility. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.



Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the FCAdisplay will come on in the DIC andseveral beeps will sound. When thisoccurs, the brake system preparesfor driver braking to occur morerapidly, if needed.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set thealert timing. The first button pressshows the current control setting onthe DIC. Additional button presseswill change this setting and turn thesystem off.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts to turning vehicles, vehicles inother lanes, objects that are not

vehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5-29.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)



behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground. Thedistance objects can be detectedmay be less during warmer or humidweather.

{ Warning

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in), the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

Turn off URPA when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, check thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-75.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.



PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. An object was hanging out of the

trunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes that

occur with vehicles in the side blindzone (or spot) areas. The SBZAwarning display will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft).


The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the next lane



over that is in the side blind zone.This indicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the SBZA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left-or right-side mirror display will lightup if a vehicle is detected in thatblind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.

SBZA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32. If SBZA is disabled bythe driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up.


SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly orwhen towing a trailer. The SBZAdetection zones that extend backfrom the side of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed. Use caution while changinglanes when towing a trailer. SBZAmay alert to objects attached to thevehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,or object extending out to either sideof the vehicle. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to be

serviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care onpage 10-75. If the DIC still displaysthe system unavailable messageafter cleaning both sides of thevehicle toward the rear corners ofthe vehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.



When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

FCC Information


Rear VisionCamera (RVC)This vehicle may have the RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC system can assist thedriver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other object

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

located outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

An image appears on theinfotainment screen when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The infotainment screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To return to the previous screensooner, do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG button toenter the configure menuoptions.

3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Camera. When acheckmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.



Symbols

The system may have a feature thatlets the driver view caution symbolson the infotainment screen whileusing the RVC. The Ultrasonic RearPark Assist (URPA) system mustnot be disabled to use the cautionsymbols. The error message RearParking Assist Symbols Unavailablemay display if URPA has beendisabled and the symbols havebeen turned on.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing theinfotainment screen when an objectis detected by the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Symbols. When acheckmark appears next to theSymbols option, symbols willappear.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

On vehicles with the RCTA, awarning triangle with a left or rightpointing arrow may also display onthe RVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from the left or the right.Three beeps will also sound. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side behind the vehicle. TheRCTA system will not work properlyif ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the rear bumpersensors.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of your vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

On some vehicles, RCTA can beturned on or off through theinfotainment system:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert.When a checkmark appears nextto the Rear Cross Traffic Alertoption, this feature will be on.

Guidelines

The RVC system may have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.



To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Guidelines. When acheckmark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay when the system is notoperating properly.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. Displayed imagesmay be closer or farther than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.




The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing alane without using a turn signal.LDW uses a camera sensor todetect the lane markings. It onlyoperates at speeds of 56 km/h (35mph) or greater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and three beepswill sound from the left or right side,depending on the lane departuredirection. LDW will not warn if theturn signal is on in the departuredirection, or if a sharp maneuveris made.

{ Warning

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the road

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

and maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.


The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentcluster will come on briefly.

If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking while thevehicle is traveling at 56 km/h (35mph) or greater. If the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal, thisindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, three beeps willbe sounded from the left or rightside, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appearwhen the system is on and thevehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h(35 mph):. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.. The weather may be limiting

visibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.

If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ Warning

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlamps

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S., to help keep theengine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines.

Recommended FuelFor vehicles with a 2.0L engine, usepremium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher.Regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher can be used,but acceleration could be reduced,and an audible knocking noise maybe heard. If the octane is less than87, a heavy knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a higher octane rating,the engine needs service.

For vehicles with a 2.4L engine, useregular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.If the octane rating is less than 87,an audible knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If heavy knocking is



heard when using gasoline with ahigher octane rating, the engineneeds service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain an

octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-48.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-14. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the



condition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-48.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, part

number 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way.



The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicksafter fueling.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-75.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-14.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-72.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-73.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle orother parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode on page 9-27. Use a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-24.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer

lamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphill

grades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10-19.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.



If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10-19.

Trailer Towing (2.0LEngine)The vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Trailer Towing (Except2.0L Engine)Before pulling a trailer, threeimportant considerations have to dowith weight:. Weight of the trailer.. Weight of the trailer tongue.. Total weight on your vehicle's

tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that canbe too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pull



a trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any

cargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.

The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or other



bumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-24.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-28 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-29.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-41Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-68

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-72Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-28.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-13.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle. It is located inside thevehicle to the left of the steeringcolumn.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andwith hand palm side down, slidethe secondary hood releasehandle toward the driver side ofthe vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-5

3. Lift the hood and pull the proprod by the sleeve from theretainer, located above theradiator.

4. Securely place the hood propinto the slot on the underside ofthe hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop by thesleeve from the retainer slot onthe underside of the hood andreturn the prop to its retainerlocated above the radiator. Theprop rod must click into placewhen returning it to the retainerto prevent hood damage.

2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.0L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-13.

2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-9.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-15.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-9.

5. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10-21.

6. Battery on page 10-24 (UnderCover).

7. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10-16.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

9. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-32.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-21.


10-8 Vehicle Care

2.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-13.

2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-15.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-9.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-9.

5. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10-21.

6. Battery on page 10-24 (UnderCover).

7. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10-16.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-69.

9. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-32.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-21.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.


10-10 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation of

what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.


Vehicle Care 10-11

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity grade

will provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your

skin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. For


10-12 Vehicle Care

the oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-28.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.


Vehicle Care 10-13

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2, and be sure to use thefluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-11.

Manual TransmissionFluid

How to Check ManualTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soon

as possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11-11for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has either a symbol ortext specifying the type of brakefluid. The common brake/clutch fluidreservoir is filled with GM approved

DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated onthe reservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-6 for reservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.


10-14 Vehicle Care

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-2. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Remove the six screws thatsecure the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly.

5. Install the cover by lowering itover the filter and secure withthe screws.

2.4L L4 Engine

1. Remove the six screws thatsecure the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly.

5. Install the cover by lowering itover the filter and secure withthe screws.


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

2.4L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-19.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-19 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-6 for more information onlocation.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ Caution

In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator,heater core, and other parts. Usethe recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. This

will allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps1–3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an coolanttemperature gauge to warn of theengine overheating. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-11.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should be


10-20 Vehicle Care

running. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the coolant temperature gauge isno longer in the overheat zone, thevehicle can be driven. Continue todrive the vehicle slowly for about10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicledistance from the vehicle in front.If the warning does not come backon, continue to drive normally andhave the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-6 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluid

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

expansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.


10-22 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in

pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected can

change in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-6 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.


Vehicle Care 10-23

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

Checking Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch fluid can bechecked without taking off the capby looking at the brake/clutch fluidreservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brake/clutch hydraulic system checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system, make surethe level is above MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5-16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have to

(Continued)


10-24 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

be replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-6 for battery location.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-69 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


10-26 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See the Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-12.

{ Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not allow thewiper arm to touch the windshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-30.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps


1. Low-Beam Headlamp

2. High-Beam Headlamp

3. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.


10-28 Vehicle Care

2. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

3. Remove the headlamp bulbaccess cover.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

5. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb.

6. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

7. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

8. Install the headlamp bulb accesscover.

9. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing it straightinto the bottle. Ensure that thefiller neck clip engages into theunderhood electrical centerretainer.

Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.

2. Remove the parking/turn signallamp bulb socket from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

Fog LampsTo replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp locatedunder the front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lamp bulbassembly.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

4. Install the new bulb by turning itclockwise into the assembly.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

Trunk Deck Inboard Taillampand Back-Up Lamp


Vehicle Care 10-29


1. Back-Up Lamp

2. Taillamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the push pins (1)retaining the trunk deck trimcover.

3. Pull the hinge cover (3)rearward.

4. For the passenger side bulb,remove the pull handlefasteners (2) and pull handle.

5. Pull the trunk deck trim down farenough to gain access to thelamps.

6. Remove the bulb socket byturning counterclockwise.

7. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling straight out.

8. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

9. Reverse Steps 1–7 to reinstall.

Stoplamp, Taillamp, and TurnSignal Lamp


1. Taillamp

2. Turn Signal Lamp

3. Stoplamp/Taillamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the push pins securingthe trunk trim.

3. Pull the trunk lining away fromthe taillamp assembly.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the rear taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb straight out toremove it from the bulb socket.

6. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

7. Push the bulb socket straight inand turn it clockwise to lock itinto place.

8. Reinstall the trunk trim.

9. Reinstall the push pins.


10-30 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thelamp assembly openingengaging the clip side first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921K

Deck Lid Taillamp 194

Fog Lamp H11 LL

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High‐BeamHeadlamp

H9LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Low‐BeamHeadlamp

H11

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

H21W

Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motorcools, and the wiper control isturned off. After removal of theblockage, the wiper motor willrestart when the control is moved tothe desired operating position.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10-32, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10-35, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10-37.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To open the fuse block cover, pressthe clips at the front and back androtate the cover up to the side.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

There is a fuse puller in the enginecompartment fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

1 20A EngineControlModule


Vehicle Care 10-33

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

2 10A OxygenSensor/PurgeSolenoid

3 15A Ignition Coils/Injectors

4 15A Spare

5 – Empty

6a – Empty

6b 7.5A MirrorDefogger

7 5A PowertrainCooling

8 7.5A Mass AirFlow Sensor/Pre O2Sensor

9 – Empty

10 5A BatteryPotentialSignal

11 7.5A Spare

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

12 – Empty

13 25A AntilockBrakeSystemValves

14 – Empty

15 10A EngineControlModule

17 10A TransmissionControlModule

22 – Empty

24 15A RightHigh-BeamHeadlamp

25 15A LeftHigh-BeamHeadlamp

26 15A Front FogLamps

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

31 – Empty

32 5A Airbag

33 – Empty

34 7.5A Spare

35 7.5A Door SwitchSupply/LeftPowerWindow

36 10A AirConditioningCompressorClutch

37 10A Canister Vent

38 – Empty

39 20A Fuel SystemControlModule

40 10A FrontWindshieldWasher

41 – Empty


10-34 Vehicle Care

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

46 – Empty

47 15A Horn

49 20A Fuel Pump

50 – Empty

51 5A InsideRearviewMirror

52 – Empty

53 10A IgnitionEngineControlModule/TransmissionControlModule

54 7.5A InstrumentCluster/FuelSystemControlModule/Heater,Ventilation,

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

and AirConditioningRun/Crank

J-CaseFuses

Amps Usage

16 30A StarterControl

18 30A Rear WindowDefogger

19 30A Front PowerWindow

20 30A Rear PowerWindow

21 40A RearElectricalCenter

23 – Empty

27 50A Spare

28 – Empty

J-CaseFuses

Amps Usage

29 30A ElectricParkingBrake

30 60A AntilockBrakeSystemPump

42 40A EngineCooling Fan(RPO LEA)

43 30A Front Wipers

44 – Empty

45 30A EngineCooling Fan(RPO LEA)

48 60A EngineCooling Fan

Relays Usage

1 Empty

2 Starter


Vehicle Care 10-35

Relays Usage

3 Engine ControlPowertrain

4 Rear WindowDefogger

5 Empty

6 High-BeamHeadlamps

7 Spare

8 Empty

9 Spare

10 EGR/Coolant Pump/AIR Solenoid Valve

11 Engine Cooling Fan(RPO LEA)



14 Run/Crank

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block ison the driver side of the instrumentpanel. To access the fuses:

1. Access the fuse block byopening the storagecompartment.

2. Pull straight down and out toremove the storagecompartment.

3. Remove the cover.

To reinstall the cover, line up theretainers and push into place.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


Fuses Amps Usage

1 2A Body ControlModule



4 20A InfotainmentSystem

5 10A InformationDisplay/ParkingAssist

6 20A Ignition/ElectronicKey System

7 20A Power Outlet



Fuses Amps Usage


11 40A Interior Fan

12 25A DriverPower Seat

13 – Not Used

14 7.5A DiagnosticConnector

15 10A Airbag

16 10A CentralLockingSystem/Tailgate

17 10A AirConditioningSystem

18 30A InfotainmentSystem


20 5A PassengerPower Seat


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fuses Amps Usage

21 7.5A InstrumentCluster

22 2A/5A Ignition/ElectronicKey System



25 – Not Used

26 – Not Used

Relays Usage

1 Trunk Open

2 Door Security

3 Power Outlet

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block,if equipped, is on the left side of thetrunk behind a cover.


10-38 Vehicle Care


MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F02 – Empty

F03 5A Rear ParkAssist

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F04 – Empty

F06 – Empty

F07 10A Spare

F08 – Empty

F09 – Empty

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F10 – Empty

F11 – Empty

F13 – Empty

F14 – Empty

F15 – Empty

F16 5A Rear VisionCamera

F17 – Empty

F18 – Empty

F19 7.5A HeatedSteeringWheel

F20 25A Sunroof

F21 25A Heated Seats

F22 – Empty

F24 – Empty

F25 5A Side BlindZone Alert

F26 30A Spare


Vehicle Care 10-39

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F28 – Empty

F30 – Empty

F31 30A Amplifier

F32 – Empty

J-CaseFuses

Amps Usage

F1 – Empty

F5 – Empty

F12 – Empty

F23 – Empty

F27 30A Passive Entry

F29 – Empty

Relays Usage

R01 Run/Crank

R02 Run

R03 Empty

R04 Empty

R05 Empty

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)


10-40 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-41.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-55.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P235/45R18size tires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contact

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

with road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-57.


Vehicle Care 10-43

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is for

emergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-68 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-60.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-47.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description :These characters represent theload index and speed rating ofthe tire. The load indexrepresents the load carryingcapacity a tire is certified to

carry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-47.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

GAWR FRT : Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight :The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lb). SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted ona vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-47 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-54.


Vehicle Care 10-47

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-57.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tire


10-48 Vehicle Care

inflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10-68.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot be

determined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


Vehicle Care 10-49

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-49.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiver inthe vehicle.


10-50 Vehicle Care

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and details

about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-47.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-53, Tire Rotation onpage 10-53 and Tires onpage 10-39.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-51

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-55.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,


10-52 Vehicle Care

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off or place thevehicle power mode in ON/RUN/START. See Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9-14or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9-16.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message asking if the processshould begin should appear.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFor press STOP to turn theignition off.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-2.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after the

rotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-54and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-59.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label after


10-54 Vehicle Care

the tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-47and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-49.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-53 and TireRotation on page 10-53.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if


Vehicle Care 10-55

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-41.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-53.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-48.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover


Vehicle Care 10-57

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-55 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire


10-58 Vehicle Care

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road


Vehicle Care 10-59

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

ground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-39. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-61

Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Retainer Nut2. Tool Bag Tether3. Tool Bag4. Spare Tire

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2-14.

2. Lift the load floor.

3. Turn the retainer nut (1)counterclockwise to remove it.Then remove the tool bagtether (2) from the stow rod, thetool bag (3) containing the wheelwrench and wheel blocks, andthe spare tire (4).

4. Remove the jack, jack handleextension, and two-piecewrench, if equipped.

1. Hex Head Jack2. Jack Handle Extension3. Coin/Pierce Jack4. Two-Piece Wrench

This vehicle may have one of thefollowing: A coin/pierce jack (3), ajack handle extension (2), and atwo-piece wrench (4), or a hex headjack (1) and two-piece wrench (4).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.


Vehicle Care 10-63

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched or

damaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-60 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once on eachwheel nut to loosen it. Do notremove them yet.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at the oppositecorner of the tire being changed.See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-60 for proper wheelblock placement.

5. Place the jack under the vehicle.

6. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

If you have a hex head jack,place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.


10-64 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

7. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by anotch in the flange. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/Pierce Jack Similar

8. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise until it comesin contact with the notch in theflange.

Make sure the jack lift headnotch is placed in the flangenotch.

Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)


10-66 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.


Vehicle Care 10-67

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

18. Remove the wheel blocks andreturn them to their properstorage location.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps hand

snug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

{ Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Replace the wheel wrench andwheel blocks in the tool bag.

2. Remove the foam container fromthe rear storage compartment.

Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, HexHead Jack Similar

3. Place the flat tire in the storagecompartment with the valvestem down.

4. Place the jack and jack handleextension, if the vehicle has one,in the foam container.


10-68 Vehicle Care

5. Place the foam container insidethe flat tire. Align the hole withthe stow rod.

6. Place the tool bag tether overthe stow rod and the tool bagrear of the flat tire.

7. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseuntil tight.

8. Replace the load floor.

The load floor may not lay flat.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h

(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

{ Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

{ Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-24.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

2.4L L4 Engine Shown, 2.0L L4Engine Similar

1. Discharged Battery Negative (–)Grounding Point


10-70 Vehicle Care

2. Discharged BatteryPositive (+) Post

3. Good Battery Negative (–) Post

4. Good Battery Positive (+) Post

The jump start positive post islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint is the engine block or anengine mounting bolt. Connect to aspot as far away from thedischarged battery as possible.

The jump start positive post andnegative post are on the battery ofthe vehicle providing the jump start.

The positive jump start connectionis under a trim cover. Open thecover door to expose the terminal.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-22.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-71

Warning (Continued)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) post (2) on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) post (4) of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) post (3) of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point (1)for the discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage to thevehicle. The disabled vehicleshould be towed on a flatbed carcarrier. Use care when there islow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment. Attempting topull the vehicle onto a flatbedwithout following the proper stepscould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

To load a vehicle onto a flatbedcarrier:

1. The vehicle must be on a flatsurface.

2. The front tires must be properlyinflated. If necessary, move arear tire to the front to replace aflat or damaged tire.

3. Place a 1.2 m (4 ft) X 102 mm(4 in) X 102 mm (4 in) woodbeam (4) under the front cradlecrossmember (3), and on top ofboth tow chains (5) to ensure thetow chains do not come intocontact with the front fascia (1).

Try to minimize the contact ofthe chains with the flexibleair dam (2).

4. Ramps (2) are required for thefront fascia (3) to clear theflatbed (1). The ramp heightshould be approximately 102 mm(4 in). Lower the flatbed onto theset of ramps.

{ Caution

If ramps are not used, the frontfascia will come into contact withthe flatbed and may causedamage. Always use ramps.


Vehicle Care 10-73

5. After the front tires are on theflatbed adjust the flatbed upwardto provide additional clearancebetween the air dam, fascia, andflatbed.

6. When the fascia has enoughclearance to clear the flatbed,lower the flatbed, and finishpulling the vehicle onto theflatbed.

7. Secure the vehicle to theflatbed (2) using nonabrasivestraps (1) through all four wheelopenings and secure the strapsto the flatbed (2).

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far will the vehicle betowed? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Does the vehicle have theproper towing equipment? Seeyour dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing


10-74 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used. See“Dolly Towing” following.

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly.

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

{ Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as


10-76 Vehicle Care

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating.

Use only lukewarm water, a softcloth, and mild car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses. Donot clean or wipe them while theyare dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or


10-78 Vehicle Care

squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-11.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, Spring andFall, use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular

dark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directly


10-80 Vehicle Care

on any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

these solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


10-84 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-48.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-9.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-47.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-53.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-21.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-53.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-9 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-16.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-21.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination and replaceworn or damaged blades. SeeExterior Care on page 10-75.

Replace wiper blades every20 000 km/12,000 mi or12 months. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-26.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-47.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-53.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-13.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-75.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-16.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.



. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-75.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-25.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-25.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-23.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

2.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires. @

2.0L Turbo Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspectspark plug wires. @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Change manual transmission fluid. @ @ @

2.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires. @

2.0L Turbo Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspectspark plug wires. @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-75.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspect



the shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-79 and Exterior Care onpage 10-75.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1® specification of the properSAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.See Engine Oil on page 10-9.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-16.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood, Door, and Trunk Lid Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs 12620540 41–108

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 67.5 cm (26.6 in) 13348838 —

Passenger Side – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 13348836 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in either the glove box orthe trunk area, has the followinginformation:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.0L L4 Engine 8.0 L 8.5 qt


Engine Oil with Filter



Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 ft lb

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Engine V AutomaticManual

0.75–0.90 mm (0.037–0.035 in)

2.4L L4 Engine K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm (0.037–0.035 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contactGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give theinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington , VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesBuick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance

Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.buick.com

The Buick online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with Buick and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.buick.com to register yourvehicle.



Buick Owner Centre (Canada)buickowner.ca

Take a trip to the Buick OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the Buick-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andBuick reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andBuick reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give

permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.



Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes

one-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resale

value, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair



center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-23.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau , QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit , MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa , Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled through the OnStarRemoteLink® mobile app. Forcoverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® devicesto check vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 888-4-ONSTAR

(888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features


14-6 OnStar

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTY

system can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To


OnStar 14-7

change the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contact

Roadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbal

route or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-57. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


OnStar 14-9

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names


14-10 OnStar

“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-41

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-24


i-2 INDEX

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 3-47Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13


INDEX i-3

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-68CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3


i-4 INDEX

EElectric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Cooling System Messages . . .5-27

Engine (cont'd)Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-49Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont'd)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Requirements, California . . . . .9-49System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Gauges (cont'd)Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamps (cont'd)High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-33Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13


i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-14, 9-16Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-29Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-41LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-18Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-27Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Object Detection System . . . . .5-29Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-30Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4


i-8 INDEX

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® VehicleDiagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23Parking AssistUltrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-24

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15


INDEX i-9

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-43Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


i-10 INDEX

Seats (cont'd)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-47

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-18Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5


INDEX i-11

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-49Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-48Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-52Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-73Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-39Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-36Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-18


i-12 INDEX

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-46

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26

2014 Buick Verano Owner Manual M - Dealer.com USInstrument Cluster on page 5-9. 4. Windshield...

Documents

Transcript of 2014 Buick Verano Owner Manual M - Dealer.com USInstrument Cluster on page 5-9. 4. Windshield...